Buick Owner's Manual 2004 Regal Owners

User Manual: Buick sitemap

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 354

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2004 Buick Regal Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-6
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-6
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-27
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-46
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-54
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-17
Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-34
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-35
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-36
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-17
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
......... 3-26
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-42
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-44

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-31
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-53
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-60
Tires
...................................................... 5-61
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-89
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-97
Electrical System ...................................... 5-97
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-103
.....................................
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1

Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK, the
BUICK Emblem and the name REGAL are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10334119 A First Edition
ii

How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.

Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in
the manual, and the page number where you will find it.

Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”

{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Vehicle Symbols

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.

Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

✍ NOTES

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Systems

Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Rear Seats .......................................................1-6
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-11
Driver Position ..............................................1-12
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-19
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-20
Center Passenger Position .............................1-20
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-21
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-24
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-26
Child Restraints .............................................1-27
Older Children ..............................................1-27
Infants and Young Children ............................1-29
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-32

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-35
Top Strap ....................................................1-36
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-38
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System (Rear) ..........................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ................................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-44
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-46
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-49
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-51
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-51
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-52
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-52
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-54
Restraint System Check ..................................1-54
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-54
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-55

1-1

Front Seats
Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

1-2

Lift the bar located under the front of the passenger’s
seat to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar. Try to move the seat to be
sure it is locked into place.

Six-Way Power Seats

Heated Seats

The control for the driver’s
side power seat is located
on the outboard side of
the seat cushion. Your
vehicle may be equipped
with a passenger’s
side power seat. That
control is located on the
outboard side of the
passenger’s seat cushion.

• To move the seat forward or rearward, push the
control forward or rearward.

• To raise or lower the entire seat, push the control
up or down.

• To raise or lower the front of the seat, push the
front of the control up or down.

• To raise or lower the rear of the seat, push the rear

If the vehicle has heated seats, the driver and front
passenger seat switches are located on the center
console, behind the automatic transaxle shift lever.
Press HI to warm each seat to a higher temperature.
Press LO to warm each seat to a lower temperature. To
turn the heat off, put the switch in the center position.

of the control up or down.

1-3

Reclining Seatbacks

Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to
release the seatback, then move the seatback to the
desired position. Release the lever to lock the seatback
in place. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seatback and the seatback will move forward.

1-4

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.

Head Restraints

{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-5

Rear Seats

Safety Belts

Split Folding Rear Seat

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone

If the vehicle has a split folding seat, you can gain
access to the interior of the vehicle through the trunk.

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.

To do this, pull forward
on the seat tab, located
on the side of the rear
seat, to move the
rear seatback down.

To return the seatback to its original position, push it
back up, making sure the seat latch locks it in place.

1-6

{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-29.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

1-7

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.

1-8

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-9

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-10

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the
use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get
the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-27
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

1-11

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.

1-12

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-13

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.

1-14

To move it down, squeeze the release lever and the
shoulder belt guide as shown and move the height
adjuster to the desired position. You can move
the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release lever to make sure it has locked into position.

Q: What’s wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-15

Q: What’s wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

1-16

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

Q: What’s wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-17

Q: What’s wrong with this?

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-18

The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-19

Right Front Passenger Position

Lap Belt

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.

Center Passenger Position

When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-20

Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.

1-21

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-22

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page 1-26.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-23

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger in the
rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and booster
seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may
be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install
a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from the edge of the
seatback and the interior body to remove the guide
from its storage clip.

1-24

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

1-25

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-21.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.

1-26

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

Child Restraints
Older Children

Q:
A:

What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-27

Q:
A:

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-28

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,
but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-24. If the child is
so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to
the child’s face or neck, you might want to place
the child in the center seat position, the one
that has only a lap belt.

CAUTION:

(Continued)

this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
CAUTION:

(Continued)

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-29

CAUTION:

(Continued)

it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
CAUTION:

1-30

(Continued)

{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.

1-31

Child Restraint Systems

{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.

1-32

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-33

Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.

1-34

One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here’s why:

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.

1-35

Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-37. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.

1-36

{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

Top Strap Anchor Location
The vehicle has top strap anchors installed for the rear
seating positions.

They are located under trim covers on the rear seatback
filler panel.
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position because there is no place
to anchor the strap.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)” following.

1-37

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
The vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) in all three rear seating positions.

This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead it uses vehicles anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).

1-38

The labels are located near the base of all three rear
seating positions.

{CAUTION:

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position” in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.

To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.

1-39

Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Rear)

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-36.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.

1-40

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-38. See Top Strap
on page 1-36 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

1-41

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-42

If your child restraint is equipped with the latch system,
see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 1-38. See Top Strap on
page 1-36 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap belt to secure the restraint in
this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-43

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position

1-44

{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

1-45

Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact
air bag for the driver.
If your vehicle has a side
impact air bag for the
driver it will say AIR BAG
on the air bag covering
on the side of the driver’s
seatback closest to
the door.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-46

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:

CAUTION:

(Continued)

crashes where something hits the driver’s side
of your vehicle. It isn’t designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.

{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt, even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but don’t replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bag for the driver is
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
CAUTION:

(Continued)

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly, whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.

{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle, and should
not lean on the door.

1-47

{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”

1-48

There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-30
for more information.

Where Are the Air Bags?

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

1-49

{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-50

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is
about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
Your vehicle may or may not have a driver’s side impact
air bag. See Air Bag Systems on page 1-46. A driver
’s side impact air bag is designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes involving the driver’s door. A
side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity
is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. A
driver’s side impact air bag is not designed to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both the frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal air
bag modules are located inside the steering wheel
and instrument panel. For vehicles with a driver’s side
impact air bag, the air bag modules are located in
the seatback closest to the driver’s door.

1-51

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. A side impact air bag
would not help you in many types of collisions, including
frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not
toward that air bag. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s
side impact air bag.

1-52

What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module – the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver’s
side impact air bag – will be hot for a short time.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and

{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.

diagnostic module, which records information
about the frontal air bag system. The module
records information about the readiness of the
system, when the system commands air bag
inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at
deployment. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system will not work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel, both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s side impact air
bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

1-53

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.

{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

1-54

Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.

1-55

✍ NOTES

1-56

Section 2

Features and Controls

Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-12
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16
PASS-Key® II ...............................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-17
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-17
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-19
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-21

Parking Brake ..............................................2-24
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-27
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-28
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-31
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-32
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® ...................................................2-32
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-33
OnStar® System .............................................2-34
Storage Areas ................................................2-35
Glove Box ...................................................2-35
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-35
Convenience Net ..........................................2-36
Sunroof .........................................................2-36

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.

2-2

The vehicle has two keys that are used for separate
functions.
The ignition key is for the
ignition only.

The keys have unique codes embedded in them to help
prevent theft. See PASS-Key® II on page 2-16 for
more information.
Your dealer or Buick Roadside Assistance can provide
the correct codes for the keys. Contact your dealer
or see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for
more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.

The door key is for the
driver door and all
other locks.

If the vehicle has the OnStar® system with an active
subscription, and the keys were locked inside, a
command could be sent by the OnStar® system to
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-34
for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3

1. This device may not cause interference, and

Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation

2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

The remote keyless entry transmitter lets you lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors or release its trunk lid
from about 3 feet (1 m) and up to 30 feet (9 m) away.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

LOCK: Press the LOCK
button to lock all the doors.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4

UNLOCK: Press the UNLOCK button to unlock the
driver door and turn on the interior lamps. See
“Illumination on Remote Activation” later in this section
for more details. Press UNLOCK again to unlock
the passenger doors.

F (Trunk Release): To release the trunk lid, press
this button. The trunk will only unlock if the transaxle
is in PARK (P).

L (Remote Alarm): Press this button to activate an
alarm. The ignition must be in OFF or ACCESSORY for
the remote alarm to work. When the remote alarm
button is pressed, the headlamps will flash, the horn will
sound repeatedly, and the interior lamps will turn on.
The alarms will turn off when one of the following occurs:
• The remote alarm button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed a second time.

• The ignition is moved to RUN.
• The alarms have been on for about two minutes.

Security Feedback
The remote keyless entry transmitter can be
programmed so that when the LOCK or UNLOCK
button is pressed, the vehicle gives visual or audible
feedback confirmation. Each lock or unlock command
verification must be programmed individually. The
ignition must be OFF for this feature to work.

Programming the LOCK Command
One of four modes can be selected to confirm a LOCK
command.
Mode 1 (One Chime): No Verification
Mode 2 (Two Chimes): Horn Chirp

Mode 3 (Three Chimes): Headlamps Flash
Mode 4 (Four Chimes): Horn Chirp and
Headlamps Flash
The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current lock mode mode, or to change
the lock mode, do the following:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Press and hold the power door lock switch in
the LOCK position.
3. While holding the power door lock switch in the
LOCK position, press and release the remote
keyless entry transmitter LOCK button.
A series of one to four chimes will sound,
corresponding to the current lock mode.
4. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter LOCK
button to advance to the next lock mode.
If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle will enter
Mode 1.
5. To set a mode, release the power door LOCK
switch after the chime sequence of the desired
mode is heard.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not affect the programmed mode.

2-5

Programming the UNLOCK Command
One of four modes can be selected to confirm an
UNLOCK command.

5. To set a mode, release the power door unlock
switch after the chime sequence of the desired
mode is heard.

Mode 1 (One Chime): No Verification

Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not affect the programmed mode.

Mode 2 (Two Chimes): Horn Chirp

Delayed Locking

Mode 3 (Three Chimes): Headlamps Flash

This feature can be turned on or off. It delays the locking
of the doors for five seconds after the power door LOCK
or the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed and the last door is closed.

Mode 4 (Four Chimes): Horn Chirp and
Headlamps Flash
The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current unlock mode mode, or to change
the unlock mode, do the following:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Press and hold the power door lock switch in
the unlock position.
3. While holding the power door lock switch in the
unlock position, press and release the remote
keyless entry transmitter UNLOCK button.
A series of one to four chimes will sound,
corresponding to the current unlock mode.
4. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter UNLOCK
button to advance to the next unlock mode.
If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle will enter
Mode 1.
2-6

If a door is opened before five seconds, the delayed
lock is cancelled. When all doors are closed again,
delayed locking begins again.
Three chimes will sound to indicate that this feature is
on. The chime will sound only when the key is not in the
ignition and a door is open.
To cancel delay locking, do any of the following:
• Press the unlock portion of the power door lock
switch.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• Press the LOCK portion of the power door lock
switch a second time.
• Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter a second time.
• Insert the ignition key into the ignition.

Programming Delayed Locking

Illumination on Remote Activation

Delayed locking has two modes.

This feature provides interior lighting when a remote
keyless entry door unlock command is received by the
vehicle. The ignition must be off for this feature to
work. The interior lamps will stay on until either the
ignition is turned to RUN or until 40 seconds has
elapsed. If a door is opened during this time, the timed
lighting will be canceled, and the interior lamps will
remain on. Also see “Entry Lighting” under Interior
Lamps on page 3-14 for more information.

Mode One (One Chime): Delayed locking is turned off.
Mode Two (Two Chimes): Delayed locking is
turned on.
1. Close the doors.
2. Move the ignition key to the RUN position.
3. Apply the egular brakes.
4. Press and hold the power door unlock switch. While
holding the power door unlock switch, move the
shift lever out of and back into PARK (P).
One or two chimes will sound indicating what mode
the delayed locking is in.
5. Release the power door unlock switch, after one of
the chime mode sequences, to set the desired mode
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to one year
will not affect the programmed mode.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely coded
to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your dealer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters so they also can be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter cannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle can
have a maximum of four transmitters coded to it.

2-7

Battery Replacement
The battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter
should last about three years.
If the battery is weak the transmitter will not work within
its normal range. It is probably time to change the
battery if you have to be very close to the vehicle before
the transmitter works.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.

To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object like a thin coin into the slot on
the back of the transmitter and pry apart the front
and back.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this. Make sure the new battery is a
type CR2032 or equivalent, and that the positive (+)
side of the battery is facing down.
3. Snap the front and back of the transmitter together.
4. Resynchronize and test the operation of the
transmitter with the vehicle.

Resynchronization
After the battery has been changed in the remote
keyless transmitter, it will need to be resynchronized. To
do this, press and hold both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons until you hear one horn chirp.

2-8

Doors and Locks
Door Locks

{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use the door key or remote keyless
entry transmitter. From the inside use the manual
or power door locks.
To manually lock or unlock the driver’s door from the
outside, insert the key and turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise.

To lock or unlock the doors from the inside, push the
manual lock lever forward or rearward.

2-9

Power Door Locks
The vehicle has front
power door lock switches.
Press the top portion of
a door lock switch to
unlock or the bottom
portion to lock all doors.

Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Programmable power door locks are intended to provide
enhanced security and convenience by automatically
locking and unlocking doors under certain conditions.
The doors can be set to one of four operating modes.
Mode 1: Doors do not lock or unlock automatically when
the transaxle is shifted out of or into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P), but do not unlock automatically
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.

2-10

Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P) and automatically unlock
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 4: All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P) but only the driver’s door
automatically unlocks when the transaxle is shifted into
PARK (P).

The vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 3. The
mode may have been changed since then. To
determine the current mode, or to change the mode, do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Close all of the doors.
3. Apply the brakes.
4. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
5. Move the shift lever out of and back into PARK (P)
while holding the door lock switch in the LOCK
position.
6. Release the door lock switch to set the
desired mode.
After initially moving the shift lever out of and back into
PARK (P), each additional shift cycle will advance
the programming from the current mode to the next
operating mode. If cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle
will enter operating Mode 1.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not affect the programmed mode.

Lockout Protection
This feature helps to prevent a driver from locking the
keys inside of the vehicle by disabling the power
door locks when the following occurs:

• A door is opened.
• The key is left in the ignition.
• A power door lock is pressed.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch in the lock position
for more than three seconds while the key is in the
ignition and any door is open.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of the vehicle. If the manual door lock is used
or if the key is left in the vehicle, but not in the ignition,
you could still be locked out of the vehicle. Always
remember to take the keys with you.

Leaving Your Vehicle
Before leaving the vehicle, take the keys, open the
door, and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door. See “Delayed Locking” in this section for
more information.

2-11

Trunk

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.

2-12

Trunk Lock
To unlock the trunk lid from the outside, insert the door
key into the trunk lock and turn it counterclockwise.
Or, with the vehicle in PARK (P), press the open trunk
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Remote Trunk Release
Press the remote trunk
release button located
behind the glove box door
to release the trunk lid
from inside the vehicle.

The shift lever must be in PARK (P), but the key does
not have to be in the ignition for the remote trunk
lid release button to work.

Trunk Assist Handle

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to
help you close the trunk lid.

Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.

The vehicle may have an
assist handle located on
the inside of the trunk
lid toward the driver’s side
of the vehicle.

Pull down on the handle to lower the trunk lid and close
the trunk. If the trunk is not properly closed, the
DOOR/TRUNK ajar warning light will appear in the
message center of the instrument panel cluster. See
Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light on page 3-40 for
more information.

The vehicle has a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk
release handle located inside the trunk on the latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle to open the trunk from the inside.

2-13

Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-14

Power Windows

To stop the window while it is lowering, press forward
on the switch. To raise the window, press and hold
the switch forward.

Window Lock-Out
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press LOCK on this control to prevent
passengers from using their window switches. The
driver can still control all the windows with the lock on.
Press the other side of the window lock-out switch
to allow passengers individual control of their windows.

Sun Visors

The switches on the driver’s door armrest are used to
control each of the windows when the ignition is in
the ON position. Each passenger door has its
own window switch.

Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the switch
rearward and the driver’s window will open without
stopping.

To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can also be moved to the side windows. The sun visors
also have extenders that can be pulled out for added
coverage.

Visor Vanity Mirror
Open the cover on the sun visor to expose the vanity
mirror.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
If the vehicle has the lighted vanity mirrors, the lamps
come on when the cover is opened.

2-15

Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.

PASS-Key® II
The vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® II
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® II is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when the ignition
key is inserted or
removed from the ignition.

PASS-Key® II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

2-16

When the PASS-Key® II system senses that the wrong
key has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down
the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not
work and fuel will not go to the engine for about three
minutes. If someone tries to start the vehicle again with
the wrong key, or uses another incorrect key during
this time, the vehicle will not start. This discourages
someone from randomly trying keys with different
resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match.
The ignition key must be clean and dry before it is
inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the
engine does not start and the SECURITY warning
light on the instrument panel is flashing, the key may be
dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try
again. If the vehicle still does not start, the ignition
key may be faulty. Wait about three more minutes and
try a spare ignition key. At this time, you may also
want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-98 for information on fuse location. If the
starter will not work with the spare key, the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer or a locksmith who can
service the PASS-Key® II.

If a key is accidentally used that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter will not work.
The SECURITY warning light on the instrument panel
will then come on. But you do not have to wait three
minutes before trying another ignition key.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key® II to have a new key made.
If the SECURITY warning light comes on the instrument
panel while the vehicle is being driven, the engine
will still be able to be started after it is turned off. The
PASS-Key® II system, however, is not working properly
and must be serviced by your dealer. The vehicle is
not protected by the PASS-Key® II system when
this happens.
If a PASS-Key® II ignition key is lost or damaged, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® II to have a new key made. Also, see
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more
information.

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information.

2-17

Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the ignition, the key can be
turned to five different positions:

Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
C (OFF): In this position the engine is off but the
steering wheel is not locked and can still be turned. Use
the OFF position if the vehicle must be pushed or
towed.
D (RUN): This position is where the key returns to after
the vehicle is started. This position displays some of
the warning and indicator lights.
E. (START): This position starts the engine.

A (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate when the engine is off. To use
ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it
counterclockwise. The steering wheel will stay locked.
B (LOCK): This is the only position in which the ignition
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks
the ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It is a
theft-deterrent feature.

2-18

A warning chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened if the ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY
and the key is in the ignition.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP), lets the power
windows and audio system continue to operate for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and
before any of the doors are opened.

Starting Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The
engine will not start in any other position. That is a
safety feature. To restart the vehicle when it is already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15
seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as the key is held in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or six
seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.

2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, hold the key in
START for about 10 seconds at a time until the
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each
try.

2-19

Engine Coolant Heater

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the vehicle’s
diagonal brace, which is located above the engine
air cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

The vehicle may have this feature. In very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can
help. The vehicle will start easier and get better
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required.

2-20

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep
it away from moving engine parts, before starting
the engine. If this is not done, the cord could
be damaged.

How long should the coolant heater be kept plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil used in the vehicle, and some other
things. Instead of trying to list everything here, contact
your dealer in the area where the vehicle will be parking.
The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.

Automatic Transaxle Operation
The shift lever, located on
the console between the
seats, operates the
automatic transaxle.

The ignition positions are displayed on the instrument
panel cluster and will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on the automatic
transaxle when the vehicle is in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline components from
improper operation.

2-21

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-39.
The positions for the shift lever are:
PARK (P): This position locks the vehicle’s front
wheels. It is the best position to use when the engine is
started because the vehicle cannot move easily.

2-22

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You must fully apply
the regular brakes before shifting from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it
all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake
pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button. Then
move the shift lever out of PARK (P). See Shifting
Out of Park (P) on page 2-27
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to get it out
of snow, ice or sand without damaging the transaxle,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-30.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is for
normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, and
the vehicle is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

{CAUTION:

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you
increase speed may damage the transaxle. Have
your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for
higher speeds until then.

By doing this the vehicle will automatically shift down to
the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.

• When going down a steep hill.
• When driving in no-highway scenarios such as city
streets.

2-23

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
SECOND (2): This position gives the vehicle more
power but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can
use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control the
speed going down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use the brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position gives the vehicle even more
power but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2).
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle
will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-24

Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot. Push down the
parking brake pedal with
your left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the shift lever is not in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. That section shows what
to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2. Move the shift lever
into PARK (P) by
pressing the shift lock
button at the top of
the lever while pushing
the shift lever all the
way toward the front of
the vehicle.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-39.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2-25

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever out of PARK (P) without first pushing
the shift lever button. If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

2-26

Torque Lock
If the vehicle is parked on a hill and the transaxle is not
shifted into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. It might be difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before leaving the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, another vehicle might have to
push yours a little uphill. This takes some of the
pressure off the parking pawl in the transaxle, enabling
the shift lever to be moved out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

The vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control
system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when the
ignition is in the OFF position. The regular brakes must
be fully applied before the vehicle can be shifted from
PARK (P) when the ignition in RUN. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-21.

The vehicle is equipped with a shift lock release system.
It is designed to prevent ignition key removal unless
the shift lever is in PARK (P) and the shift lever button
is fully released.

If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) as brake application is maintained.
Then, move the shift lever into the desired gear.
If the brake pedal is pressed down but the vehicle still
cannot be shifted out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. There is no
shift interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the desired gear.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.

It also prevents the shift lever from moving out of
PARK (P) when the ignition is in OFF or in LOCK. The
shift lock release system will not operate in the case
of a dead or low voltage (less than 9 V) battery.
If the vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, there are two override access slots that
will allow you to override the shift lock release system.
The first access slot is located underneath the
steering column below the lock cylinder. To use this
slot, do the following:
1. Verify that the shift lever is in PARK (P) with the
shift lever button released.
2. Remove the override access slot cap to show the
override mechanism release button.
3. Insert a key or tool into the access slot and then
press and hold the override mechanism release
button.
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
6. Put the override access slot cap back on.

2-27

The key will not be able to be removed from the ignition
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P) with the shift
lever button fully released.

Parking Over Things That Burn

The second override
access slot is located on
the upper right side of
the console shift panel.

To use this slot, do the following:
1. Remove the override access slot cap.
2. Insert a key or tool into the access slot and press
and hold the override mechanism release button.

{CAUTION:

3. Move the shift lever into the desired gear position.
4. Put the override access slot cap back on.

2-28

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

(Continued)

{CAUTION:

• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.

•
•

You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
CAUTION:

over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

(Continued)

2-29

Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-26.

2-30

{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-25.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.

Mirrors

There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button located next to each lamp to
turn it on or off.

Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when
sitting in a comfortable driving position.
To reduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps, pull the
lever at the bottom of the mirror, to the night position.
To return the mirror to the day position, push the lever.

Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
The vehicle may have a mirror with Onstar®. It has a
lever located at the bottom between the two lamps. To
reduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps, pull
the lever to the night position. For the day position, push
the lever to its original position.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-34 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.

2-31

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by
pressing the left button, located on the lower part of the
mirror, for up to three seconds. When turned on, this
mirror functions like the automatic dimming rearview
mirror described previously. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2-32.

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror. Push the button in the center of the mirror to turn
this feature on or off. When it is on, the mirror will darken
gradually to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind.

There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Each lamp is turned on and off by pressing the
button next to the lamp.

One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it
is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
The mirror’s two outer buttons operate the lamps on the
bottom of the mirror.

2-32

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
The power mirror controls
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.

Outside Convex Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
To choose either the left or right outside mirror, move
the selector switch located above the control pad to the
left or the right. Then use the four-way arrows located
on the control pad to move the mirrors in the desired
direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.

2-33

OnStar® System

OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.

OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.

2-34

Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge

Storage Areas

OnStar® Personal Calling

Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box. To
open the glove box, lift the latch on its door.

With OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or call
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

Glove Box

Center Console Storage Area

OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,
entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic
and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to
your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.

The console has cupholders and a storage area for
cassette tapes.
To open the console storage area, press the latch on
the front of the console lid and pull up.
2-35

Convenience Net
The vehicle has a convenience net located on the back
wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store those in
the trunk as far forward as possible.
Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes a sliding
glass panel and a sunshade.
The switch to open the sunroof is located overhead on
the headliner.

2-36

The switch works only when the ignition is on or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in Ignition Positions
on page 2-18.
VENT: To raise the sunroof to the vent position, push
and hold the front of the switch until the sunroof glass
stops. The sunshade must be opened by hand. To close
the sunroof from the vent position, push and hold the rear
of the switch until the sunroof glass closes.
Open/Express Open: To open the sunroof, push the
rear of the switch once. The sunroof and sunshade
will open by themselves. To close the sunroof, push and
hold the front of the switch until the sunroof motor
stops. The sunshade must be closed by hand.

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-11
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-17
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-17
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-25
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-26
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-27
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-28
Tachometer .................................................3-29
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-29
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-31
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-32
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-33
Low Traction Light ........................................3-33

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-34
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-35
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38
Low Oil Level Light .......................................3-39
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-39
Security Light ...............................................3-40
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-40
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-40
Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light ........................3-40
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-41
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-41
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-42
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-42
Audio System(s) .............................................3-44
Setting the Time ...........................................3-45
Radio with CD ..............................................3-45
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-52
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-61
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-62
Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-62
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-63
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-64
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-64
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-64
3-1

Instrument Panel Overview

3-2

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-11.
B. Fog Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-11.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-27.
E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-62.
G. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.

H. Side Window Defogger Outlet. See Outlet
Adjustment on page 3-24.
I. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
J. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-5.
K. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-44.
M. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-17.
N. Climate Control. See Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-17 or Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-20.
O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-35.
P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98.

3-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the top of the steering
column.

Press the button to activate the front and rear turn
signals to flash on and off.

The hazard warning flashers let you warn others to use
caution when approaching your vehicle. They also
let police know you have a problem.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if it is not in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the
individual turn signals will not operate.

Other Warning Devices
If you store reflective, safety triangles in the vehicle, put
one at the side of the road, about 300 feet (100 m)
behind the vehicle to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency situation.

3-4

Horn

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Press the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel enables the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted.
The lever that lets the steering wheel tilt is located on
the outboard side of the steering column.
To tilt the steering wheel,
hold it and pull the lever.
Move the steering wheel to
a comfortable driving
position and release the
lever to lock it into place.

Tilt the steering wheel to the highest position to give
more room when exiting and entering the vehicle.

The lever located on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control

3-5

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever up or down. The lever
returns to its original position when the turn is
completed.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change, or that fail to work, may indicate a
burned-out signal bulb or fuse. Other drivers will not see
the signal. See Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
on page 5-56 and Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps on page 5-58 for turn signal bulb replacement
procedures. Also see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-98 for location of fuses.
A chime will sound if the turn signal is left on for more
than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. The lever will return to its original
position when released.

3-6

To change the headlamps from low beams to high
beams, or high to low, pull the multifunction lever until a
click is heard. Then release it.
This indicator will light on
the instrument panel
cluster when the
high-beam lamps are on.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. It
works even if the headlamps are off. Pull the turn
signal lever toward you a little, but not so much that you
hear a click.
If the headlamps are off or on low-beam, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
you hold the lever toward you. The high-beam indicator
on the instrument panel cluster will come on. Release
the lever to return it to the normal position.

Windshield Wipers
To operate the windshield wipers turn the band located
on the multifunction lever upward or downward.
WIPER: Turn this band to control the windshield wipers.
OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the windshield
wipers.
LO (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to LO
and past the delay settings for steady wiping at low
speed.

HI (High Speed): Turn the band away from you, to HI,
and past the delay settings for steady wiping at high
speed.
(Delayed Wiping): Turn the band away from you, just
past OFF, to one of the five delayed settings, to
choose the length of intervals between each wiping
cycle. The further the band is turned upward, toward LO,
the shorter the delay will be. Select one of these
settings for light rain or snow.
MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it until the windshield wipers start. Then let it
go. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe. If
more wipes are needed, hold the band on MIST longer.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the windshield
wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If the
blades do become worn or damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-60.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.

3-7

J(Windshield Washer): At the top of the
multifunction lever, there is a paddle with the word
PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
push the paddle. The wipers will run for several sweeps
and then either stop or return to the preset speed.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-42.

Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.

{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.

The LOW WASH light on
the instrument panel
cluster will come on when
the fluid level is low.

{CAUTION:
• Cruise control can be dangerous where

•

you can not drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.

The cruise control will automatically disengage if the
vehicle has the traction control system and begins
to limit wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10. When road conditions allow, the cruise
control can be used again.
3-8

Setting Cruise Control

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.

{CAUTION:

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it. The CRUISE light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on.

If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A
(Resume/Accelerate) briefly. The vehicle will accelerate
to the previous chosen speed and stay there.

3-9

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you
set earlier.

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Push in the SET button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there
until you accelerate to the desired speed, and then
release the switch. To increase the vehicle’s speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly
and then release it. Each time this is done, the
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after the cruise
control speed is set, by pushing the SET button.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:

• Push in the SET button until the vehicle slows down
to the desired speed, then release it.

• To slow the vehicle down in very small amounts,
push the SET button briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

3-10

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the speed and load of the vehicle, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you
may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, you may have to
brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Of course, applying the brake takes the vehicle out
of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off, or
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N),
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps
The control located to the
left of the cluster on the
instrument panel, operates
the exterior lamps.

Parking Lamps: Pull the control out, halfway to the
first position, to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:

•
•
•
•

Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamps: Pull the control out all the way, to the
second position, to turn on the headlamps together with
the previously listed lamps and lights.
A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door is
opened when the ignition switch is turned to OFF, LOCK
or ACCESSORY and the headlamps are on.
The exterior lamps control has three positions:
Off: Push the control all the way to turn off all lamps.

3-11

Daytime Running Lamps / Automatic
Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Daytime running
lamps are required to function at all times on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the front turn signal lamps will come on.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamp control off, set the parking brake while the
ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start the vehicle. The
DRL, headlamps and parking lamps will stay off until
the parking brake is released.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it is
dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. The parking lamps will remain
illuminated and the headlamps will turn off. The
fog lamps will also go on if they were on previously.

The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.

• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
• The parking brake is released.
While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s front turn
signal lamps will also be on. The headlamps, taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps will turn off and the vehicle’s headlamps
and parking lamps will turn on. The other lamps that
come on with the headlamps will also come on.

3-12

Delayed Headlamps
Delayed headlamps illumination provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave your vehicle. The feature is
activated when the vehicle’s headlamps are on due to
the automatic headlamp control feature described
previously in this section, and when the vehicle’s ignition
is turned off. The headlamps will then remain on until
the exterior lamps control is moved from OFF to
the parking lamp position or until a 90 second lighting
period has ended.
If the ignitionis turned off with the exterior lamps control
in the parking lamp or headlamps position, the
delayed headlamps illumination cycle will not occur.

This feature can be turned on and off by doing the
followihg:

Fog Lamps
Press the fog lamps button
located below the exterior
lamps control on the
left side of the steering
column to turn the
fog lamps on or off.

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Press and hold the LOCK position on the power
door lock switch while turning the exterior lamps
control on and off two times.
4. Release the LOCK position on the power door lock
switch. These operations must be carried out in a
time period of less than 10 seconds, followed
by a delay period of no more than 10 seconds.
5. Then, press and hold the unlock position on the
power door switch while turning the exterior
lamps control on and then off two times. Release
the unlock position on the power door lock
switch. These steps must be carried out in a time
period of less than 10 seconds.
After releasing the unlock position on the power door
lock switch, a single chime will be heard if the delayed
headlamp illumination function has been turned off.
Two chimes will be heard if the feature has been turned
on. Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a
year will not change the programmed operation for this
feature.

A light in the fog lamps button comes on indicating that
the fog lamps are on. The parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on for the fog lamps to work. While
the high-beam headlamps are on, the fog lamps are off.

Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps are designed to come on to
provide additional light when a turn signal lamp is
activated.

3-13

Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The instrument panel lights can be brightened or
dimmed by turning the exterior lamp knob. Turning the
knob all the way clockwise turns on the courtesy
lamps.

Courtesy Lamps
When any door is opened, several courtesy lamps come
on to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.
These lamps can also be turned on by turning the
exterior lamps control clockwise to MAX.

Entry Lighting
The courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever the UNLOCK button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
The lamps will stay on while a door is opened and then
turn off automatically about 25 seconds after it is
closed. If the UNLOCK button is pressed and a door is
not opened, the lamps will turn off after about
40 seconds.

3-14

Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.
With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at
the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim after
the delay time and then turn off.
The courtesy lamps turn off when the ignition key is
turned to RUN or START. They will come on again when
a door is opened.

Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. After all the doors have been closed, the
delayed entry lighting feature will continue to work until
one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• Twenty five seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.

Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the ignition key is removed from the ignition.
When the ignition key is removed, interior illumination
will activate and remain on until one of the following
occurs:

• The ignition is in RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• Twenty five seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.

Perimeter Lighting
Perimeter lighting provides a period of exterior vehicle
lighting. Perimeter lighting activates when the doors
are closed, the ignition is in OFF and the security
feedback feature is activated in Mode 3 or 4. See
“Security Feedback” under Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
The vehicle headlamps and back-up lamps are
then activated for a period of 25 seconds or until the
ignition switch is turned to RUN.

Perimeter lighting can be turned on or off when the
driver performs the following sequence with the engine
off and the doors closed:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Apply the brake.
4. Press and hold the LOCK position on the power
door lock switch while pressing and releasing the
remote alarm button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
This activates the customization mode. While in the
customization mode, the number of chimes
corresponding to the current mode will sound. One
chime means the feature is turned off. Two chimes
mean that the perimeter lighting feature is turned on.
Each additional press of the power door lock switch will
advance to the next mode. Release the LOCK position
on the power door lock switch to set the mode.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not change the programmed operation for this feature.

Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the underside of the
rearview mirror. Press the button next to each lamp
to turn it on and off.

3-15

Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.

Battery Rundown Protection
This helps prevent the vehicle’s battery from draining in
case the interior courtesy lamps, reading lamps,
trunk lamp, underhood lamp, glove box lamps, or sun
visor vanity lamps, if equipped, are accidently left on. If
any of these lamps are left on while the ignition is in
OFF, they will automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
The lamps will not come back on again until one of the
following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on.
• A door is opened.
If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the
odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after
only three minutes.

Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can power electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
The vehicle is equipped with a 12-volt outlet. It is located
on the console, near the floor on the passenger’s
side. Open the cover to use the outlet. Be sure to close
the cover when the outlet is not in use.
3-16

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer
before adding electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Climate Controls

The center front ashtray is located below the instrument
panel comfort controls.

Dual Climate Control System

To remove the ashtray, open the storage door. Then
open the ashtray lid, lift up and pull it out.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.

The vehicle may have this climate control system. The
heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with it.

Push the lighter to use it. When the heating element is
hot, the lighter will pop back out by itself.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.

Manual Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the following
settings on the right knob.
MAX (Maximum Air-Conditioning): This mode
recirculates much of the air inside the vehicle and sends it
through the instrument panel outlets. The air-conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

3-17

VENT (Ventilation): This mode brings in outside air
and directs it through the instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
Some air may be directed toward the windshield.
HTR (Heater): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some air directed to the outboard
outlets, for the side windows, and some air directed to
the windshield.
BLEND: This mode directs half of the air to go to the
floor outlets and half to the defroster and side window
outlets. The air-conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
The right knob can also be used for the defrost mode.
Information on defrosting and defogging can be
found later in this section.

9FAN:

The left knob controls the fan speed.

OFF: Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to
turn off the fan.
LO (Low Fan Speed): This setting creates the lowest
fan speed.

3-18

HI (High Fan Speed): This setting creates the highest
fan speed.
DRIVER (Driver’s Side Temperature): The lever on
the left adjusts the air temperature for the driver’s
side outlets. Slide the lever up to raise the temperature
and down to lower the temperature.
PASSENGER (Passenger’s Side Temperature): The
lever on the right adjusts the air temperature for the
passenger’s side outlets. Slide the lever up to raise the
temperature and down to lower the temperature.
"(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning on and off. An indicator light above the
button will come on when the air conditioning is on.
During daylight hours the interior lighting control might
need adjustment to the highest setting in order for the
indicator light to be seen. The system will cool and
dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when the A/C
indicator light is on.
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for the
vehicle to cool down.
For a quick cool-down on a very hot day, use MAX with
the temperature levers all the way in the blue area. If this
setting is used for long periods of time, the air in the
vehicle may become too dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the
temperature levers in the blue area. The system will bring
in outside air and cool it.

On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
Select BI-LEV and set the temperature levers to a
comfortable setting. The system will bring in outside air
and direct it to your upper body, while sending slightly
warmed air to your lower body. Push the A/C button for
cooling.

To defrost the window quickly, turn the mode knob to
the defrost setting and turn the driver’s and passenger’s
temperature levers all the way to the red area.

Defogging and Defrosting

Rear Window Defogger

Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity causing moisture to form and condense on the
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the
climate control system is used properly. There are two
modes to clear fog or frost from the windshield and
side windows. Use the blend mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the
defrost mode to remove frost or fog from the windshield
more quickly. For best results, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield before defrosting.

<(Rear):

0DEF (Defrost):

This setting, located on the right
knob, directs most of the air through the defroster
and the side window outlets. Some of the air is directed
to the floor and side window outlets. The air-conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

To warm passengers while keeping the windows clear,
use BLEND.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Press the button to turn the defogger on or
off. The rear window defogger will initially run for
about 15 minutes. If it is turned on again, the rear
window defogger will only run for about seven and one
half minutes before turning off.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.

3-19

Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The vehicle may have this climate control system. The
heating, cooling and ventilation can be controlled
with it.

Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode and the fan speed. There might be a
delay of two to three minutes before the fan comes on
when the automatic operation is used in cold weather.
For the automatic system to function, the temperature
must be set between 61°F (16°C) and 89°F (31°C).
1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.

3-20

2. Press the AUTO button.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster.
If the system is set at the warmest temperature
setting, 90°F (32°C), hot air will be directed to the
floor, the fan will increase to the highest speed, and
the system will remain in manual mode at that
temperature. The system will not return to automatic
until the temperature setting is lowered.
If the system is set at the coldest temperature
setting, 60°F (15°C), cold interior air will be
recirculated through the air panel outlets, and the
fan will increase to the highest speed. The
system will not return to automatic until the
temperature is raised.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield. For
more information on the solar sensor, see
“Solar Sensor” later in this section.

Manual Operation
During daylight hours, the instrument panel brightness
control might need to be adjusted to the highest setting,
in order to see the indicator lights for the various
climate control settings.
OFF: Pressing the OFF button cancels automatic
operation and places the system in manual mode. Press
the AUTO button to return to automatic operation.
TEMP (Temperature): To manually adjust the
temperature inside the vehicle, press the up arrow on
the TEMP control to raise the temperature and press the
down arrow to lower the temperature. The display will
show the selection for a few seconds, and then the
outside temperature will be displayed.
When the DUAL light indicator is on, this means the
TEMP control has set the temperature for the driver.
When the DUAL light indicator light is not on, this means
the TEMP control has set the temperature for the
entire cabin.
3-21

9 FAN:

Press the up arrow on the FAN control to
increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan
speed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automatic
operation and places the system in manual mode. Press
the AUTO button to return to automatic operation. If
the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter, if
equipped, may need to be replaced. For more
information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on
page 3-25 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
AIR FLOW: This control has several settings to control
the direction of airflow when the system is not in AUTO.
To access the various modes available, continue to press
the AIR FLOW up or down arrows until the desired mode,
listed below, appears in the display.
WINDSHIELD/FLOOR: This setting directs some of the
air to the floor outlets and some to the defroster and
side window outlets. The air-conditioning compressor will
run automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
MID/FLOOR: This mode directs airflow through both
the floor and the instrument panel outlets. A small
amount of air is directed to the windshield and the side
window outlets.
MID (Instrument Panel): This mode directs air through
the instrument panel outlets.

3-22

FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the
outlets near the floor. The rest comes out of the
defroster and side window outlets.
VENT: Press this button to turn the air-conditioning
compressor on or off. The indicator light on the VENT
mode is lit when the compressor is turned off. The
interior brightness control might have to be adjusted to
the highest setting during the day in order to see
the indicator lamp.
VENT does not operate in the FRONT defrost mode.
RECIRC (Recirculation): Press this button to turn this
mode on or off. RECIRC limits the amount of outside
air coming into the vehicle and recirculates most of the
air inside your vehicle. It can be use to prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to
quickly heat or cool the air inside the vehicle. When this
button is pressed an indicator light will come on. The
interior brightness control might have to be adjusted to
the highest setting during the day in order to see the
indicator lamp.
This setting is not permitted in FRONT defrost mode
and is only permitted in WINDSHIELD/FLOOR mode if
the compressor is turned on.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot air inside
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, press the AUTO
button. The system will automatically enter the
recirculation mode where the temperature will be at the
full cold position for maximum cooling.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water dripping underneath
the vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned
off is normal.
Operating the climate control system in the RECIRC
mode may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows when
the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select
either WINDSHIELD/FLOOR or defrost mode and
increase the speed.

Sensors
The solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar heat
and the air inside of the vehicle. This information is
used to maintain the selected temperature by regulating
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed, and
the air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield, or
the system will not work properly.

Passenger Control
The arrow buttons to control the temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle are located to the right of
the PASSENGER CONTROL window. Press the
DUAL button so that the indicator light is on. Press the
right arrow to raise the temperature and press the
left arrow to lower the temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is amber this
indicates that the passenger side temperature is
set the same as the driver’s side.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is red, this
indicates that the passenger side temperature is
set warmer than that of the driver’s side.

• If the indicator light below the arrows is blue this
indicates that the passenger side temperature is
set cooler than that of the driver’s side.

Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the outside of the windows is a result of high
humidity causing moisture to form and condense on the
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two modes to
clear fog or frost from the windshield and side windows.

3-23

Use the WINDSHIELD/FLOOR mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. For best results, clear all snow
and ice from the windshield before defrosting.

1 FRONT (Defrost):

This setting brings in outside air
and directs most of the air through the defrost outlet.
Some of the air also goes to the floor vents and the side
window outlets. The indicator light on the button will
come on and WINDSHIELD will be seen on the display.
To defrost the windows quickly, press the FRONT
button, set the temperature to 90°F (32°C), select a high
fan speed, and turn the DUAL button off.
To warm passengers while keeping the window clear,
push the AIR FLOW button to select
WINDSHIELD/FLOOR which will appear on the display.
Select a fan speed.
The air-conditioning compressor will run automatically in
this setting unless the outside temperature is below
40°F (4°C).
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

3-24

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.

= REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. It will initially turn off after about
15 minutes. If it is turned on again, it will only run for
about seven and one half minutes before turning off.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.

Outlet Adjustment
Move the control in the
center of each air outlet to
open and close the
louvers, or adjust the
direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects

To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Put the ignition in ACCESSORY and turn the
windshield wipers on.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF when the windshield
wipers are in the upright position.
3. Raise the hood.

to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.

• If the vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter

5. Remove the hood weather-strip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle and peel it back to
the center of the hood.

and the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting it may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-25 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter is located in
the engine compartment below the inlet grille, near the
passenger’s side of the windshield wiper arm.
The filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering
the air conditioning module. Like the engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically.
For information on how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.

6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.
7. Remove the air inlet grille.

3-25

8. Remove the passenger
compartment air filter
by pulling up on its tab.

9. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. For
the type of filter to use see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-13
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6.

3-26

Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on the vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know the warning lights and
gages. They are a big help.

Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show
how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safely
and economically.

United States, Uplevel (with Driver Information Center) version and optional ABS shown,
Canada and Base Level similar
3-27

Speedometer and Odometer

Trip Odometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (used in the United States) or in
kilometers (used in Canada).

The trip odometer tells how far the vehicle has been
driven since it was last reset. To set the trip odometer to
zero, press the button on the right side of the instrument
panel cluster.

The vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If ERROR
is displayed, this indicates someone has probably
tampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.
You may wonder what happens if the vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will
be done. But if it cannot, then it will be set at zero and a
label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old
mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

3-28

The trip/select reset button will go back and forth
between the odometer and the trip odometer if the
button is pressed and released within 1.5 seconds.
If the button is pressed and held for longer than
1.5 seconds while in the trip odometer mode, it will be
reset to zero. If the button is pressed and held for longer
than 1.5 seconds while in the odometer mode, it will
have no effect.

Tachometer

Safety Belt Reminder Light
If the vehicle has a
tachometer, it displays the
engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will come on for several seconds to remind
occupants to fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for several
more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

3-29

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The system check includes the air bag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag
Systems on page 1-46.
This light will come on
when the vehicle is
started, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
functioning properly.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is
started, or comes on as the vehicle is being driven,
there may be an electrical problem and the air
bag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.

3-30

{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
the ignition is turned
on, as a check to show
that it is working. Then it
should go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while the vehicle is being
driven, there may be a problem with the charging
system. It could indicate that the vehicle has a loose
accessory belt or another electrical problem. Have
it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could
drain the battery.
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the
light on, be certain to turn off all the accessories,
such as the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-31

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a brake problem.

Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light

If the light comes on while the vehicle is being driven,
pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal may
be harder to push. or it may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-31.
United States

{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.

Canada

If the vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light will
come on for a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to RUN. If the anti-lock brake system warning light
stays on longer than normal after the engine has been
started, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and
stays on while the vehicle is being driven, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the anti-lock brake system
needs service. If the light is on and the regular brake
system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes,
but it does not have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when the ignition key is turned to RUN. This
is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-32

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the vehicle has a
Traction Control System
(TCS), the traction
control system warning
light may come on for the
following reasons:

• When the system is turned off by pressing the
traction control button located on the panel directly
behind the automatic transaxle shift lever. To
turn the system back on, press the button again.
The warning light should go off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 for more
information.

• If there is a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control. If the brakes begin to
overheat, the traction control system will turn off and
the warning light will come on until the brakes
cool down.

• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem.

• If there is a base brake problem with Full-Range
Traction Control.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, the vehicle needs service.

Low Traction Light
If the vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), this light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the traction control system
working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions
may exist if the low traction light comes on, so adjust
your driving accordingly. The light will stay on for a
few seconds after the traction control system stops
limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10 or Full-Range Traction Control System
on page 4-9.

3-33

The low traction light also comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to RUN. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will function properly and
indicate when the traction control system is active.

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has a gage
that shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into
the red area, the engine is
too hot.

This light indicates that the
engine coolant has
overheated or the radiator
cooling fan is not
working.

The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
on to show that it is working.
If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-29.

3-34

This reading indicates the same thing as the warning
light. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If
the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-29.

Tire Pressure Light
The vehicle may have a
tire pressure monitor that
indicates a large change
in the pressure in one tire.

The system stores the tire pressures of the vehicle’s
properly inflated tires. The LOW TIRE light will come on
if the pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi (83 kPa)
lower than the other three tires. The LOW TIRE light will
not come on if the pressure in more than one tire is
low, if the system is not yet calibrated, or if the vehicle
is moving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
When the LOW TIRE light comes on, stop as soon as
possible and check all the tires for damage. If a tire
is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-77. Also check
the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as possible.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
The light will stay on, while the ignition is on, until the
system is reset. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-69.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that there
is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any problem
is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist
your service technician in correctly diagnosing any
malfunction.

3-35

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-36

If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-4. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.

3-37

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light
If the vehicle has a an oil
problem, this light may
stay on after the engine is
started, or come on
while you are driving.

This light indicates that oil is not going through the
engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine
could be low on oil or could have some other oil
problem. Have it fixed right away.
3-38

The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:

• The light will come on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly. If it
does not come on with the ignition on, there may be
a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed
right away.

• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, the
light may blink on and off. This is normal.

{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.

Low Oil Level Light
With the oil level
monitoring system the
LOW OIL light will come
on briefly when the ignition
is turned on.

If the light does not come on briefly, have the low oil
level sensor system checked so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, stop the vehicle on a level surface
and turn the engine off. Check the oil level using the
engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.

Change Engine Oil Light
The CHANGE OIL SOON
light should come on
briefly as a bulb check
when the engine is started.
If the light does not
come on, have it serviced.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on and stays on
after the engine is started, have the oil changed.
For additional information, see “When to Change Engine
Oil (GM Oil Life System)” and “How to Reset the
Change OIL SOON Light” under Engine Oil on
page 5-16.

The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level
during the brief period when the key is turned to on
and the engine cranks. It does not monitor the engine
oil level when the engine is running. An oil level check is
only performed if the engine has been turned off for a
considerable period of time, allowing the circulating oil to
drain back into the oil pan.

3-39

Security Light

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
The SECURITY light will
come on when the key is
turned to START, and
will stay on until the vehicle
starts.

If the LOW WASH light
comes on when the
windshield washer paddle
is used, this indicates
that the fluid is low in the
windshield washer
reservoir.

It will also flash if the ignition key is too dirty or wet for
the PASS-Key® II system to read the resistor pellet.
See PASS-Key® II on page 2-16.

The light will also come on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly.

If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the light will
come on.

Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light

Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever the cruise
control is set. See “Cruise
Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-5.

3-40

The DOOR/TRUNK light
will come on if the trunk or
any door is not completely
closed.

Service Vehicle Soon Light
The SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON light will come on if
there are certain
non-emission related
vehicle problems.

The fuel gage indicates about how much fuel is left in
the fuel tank when the ignition is on. When the indicator
nears empty, there is still a little fuel left, but you
should get more fuel soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect
vehicle performance or durability. Consult your
dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle
performance. The light will come on briefly when the
ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly.

Fuel Gage

• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but
it took more, or less, than half of the tank’s capacity
to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or accelerating.

• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
is turned off.

United States

Canada
3-41

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Low Fuel Warning Light

If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
it is located below the tachometer on the instrument
panel cluster. The DIC gives important safety and
maintenance facts. When the ignition is turned on, the
entire center lights up for just a few seconds.

United States

Canada

If the vehicle’s fuel is low, a circular light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on and a chime will
sound periodically until fuel is added to the fuel tank.
It will also come on for a few seconds when the ignition
is turned on as a check to indicate it is working. If it
does not come on then, have it fixed.

3-42

3800 V6 Engine

Control Buttons

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine
The DIC has three buttons that control its functions.
The English/Metric (E/M), RESET and MODE buttons for
the DIC are located to the left of the steering wheel,
just below the instrument panel cluster.
MODE: Press this button to change the mode being
displayed.
RESET: Press this button to reset the mode displayed.
E/M (English/Metric): Press this button to change
the display from English to metric.

3-43

Modes
AVG ECON (Average Economy): This mode shows
the average fuel economy of the vehicle since it was last
reset. Average fuel economy is viewed as a long term
approximation of overall driving and driving conditions.
To learn the average fuel economy from a new
starting point, press the RESET button while the
average fuel economy is displayed in the DIC.
INSTANTANEOUS FUEL ECONOMY: This mode
shows the current fuel economy. Instantaneous
fuel economy varies with driving conditions, such as
acceleration, braking, and the grade of the road being
traveled. The instantaneous fuel economy display
cannot be reset.
OIL LIFE MONITOR: This mode shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. When the oil life index
is less than 10%, the CHANGE OIL SOON light
will come on. Have the oil changed according to the
maintenance schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4. You will have to reset the CHANGE OIL
SOON light.
To reset the CHANGE OIL SOON light, see “How to
Reset the CHANGE OIL SOON light under Engine Oil
on page 5-16.

3-44

Also, see “When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life
System)” under Engine Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
RANGE: This mode shows the approximate distance
that can be driven without refueling. This is based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and on the fuel economy
of the most recent 25 miles (40 km) trip. This display
cannot be reset.
BOOST GAGE: If the vehicle has the supercharged
engine, this gage will show the amount of boost
the engine is receiving. This display cannot be reset.

Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with
it first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,
find out what your audio system can do and how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Radio with CD

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-18.

Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM will appear for morning hours. Press
and hold M until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold H and M at the same time until TIME UPDATED
appears on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display.

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.

3-45

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, push
the TUNE/AUDIO button repeatedly until SPEED
VOL is displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO button to
select OFF, MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to
use SCV, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.

Finding a Station

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.

Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following
steps:

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show your selection.

1. Turn the radio on.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again
to stop scanning.
3-46

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return
and the equalization that you selected will be
automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: Push and release AUDIO until BASS, MID, or
TREBLE appears on the display. Then turn the
AUDIO knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob
to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
A bar graph with indicators will show how the sound
is balanced.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then push and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep. BASS and a zero, MID and a zero, or TREBLE
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country/western,
jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release AUDIO until FADE appears
on the display. Then turn the AUDIO knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. A bar
graph with indicators will show how the sound is
balanced.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FADE. Then push and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. The indicator
will be centered on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio mode by
waiting five seconds without making any changes. Then
push and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds
until you hear a beep. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display.

3-47

Radio Data System (RDS)

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station

Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display,
instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.

3-48

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow to stop at a
station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.

RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view an old message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.

3-49

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio
finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements,
the radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the
brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to
go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the
display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcements even if
the volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
cassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.

3-50

Radio Messages
CAL (CALIBRATE): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.

Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The CD should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is
off, first press the eject or DISP button.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced level. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show the elapsed time of the track.

Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving backward through the CD.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the CD.

2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced level. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show the elapsed time of the track.

To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow for two
seconds until SCAN appears on the display. You will hear
a beep. The CD will go to the next track, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound will
mute and SCAN and the track number will appear on the
display while scanning. The CD will only scan forward.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.

DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.

CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio.

Z (Eject):

Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition or radio off, if this button
is pressed first.

3-51

CD Messages

Radio with Cassette and CD

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

3-52

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. To get to SCV, press the
TUNE/AUDIO knob repeatedly until SPEED VOL is
displayed. Turn the TUNE/AUDIO knob to select OFF,
MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting allows for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as
you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
The time can be displayed with the ignition on or off.

Finding a Station

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until SCAN and
the preset number appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to the stations that
are in the selected band and only to those with a
strong signal.

Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following
steps:

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.

1. Turn the radio on.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the equalization that you selected
will be automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-53

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

3-54

Radio Data System (RDS)

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station

Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies

1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
The P-TYPE symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press P-TYP to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
station with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.

3-55

SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press P-TYP to activate program type select mode.
The P-TYPE symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the AUDIO knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SEEK arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press and hold either SEEK arrow to stop at a
station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When
you turn the ignition off and then on again, the
alternate frequency feature will automatically be
turned on.

3-56

RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or CD is playing. If a cassette tape or
CD is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view and old
message until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.

Playing a Cassette Tape
You tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition and the radio are on,
the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If you
hear nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not
be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the
tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME and AUDIO
controls just as you do for the radio. The display will
show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition or radio
is off, first press the eject or DISP button. Cassette tape
adapter kits for portable CD players will work in your
cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-57

1s(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse
quickly within the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed.
2 \(Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly within the tape. The radio will play while the tape
advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed.
6 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.

© SEEK ¨: Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for seek to
work. Press the left or the right arrow to go to the
previous or to the next selection on the tape. SEEK and
a negative or positive number will be displayed.
Pressing the left or right arrow multiple times will
increase the number of selections to be searched up to
-5 or +5. If -5 or +5 is shown on the display the
cassette tape player will fast forward or rewind through
the four selections and stop at the fifth selection.
To scan cassette tape selections, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for two seconds until SCN appears on
the display. You will hear a beep. The tape will go to the
next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next selection. The cassette tape will only scan
forward. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
3-58

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive cassette or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
a CD when listening to the radio.

Z (Eject):

Press this button to eject a tape. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. Cassettes may be loaded with the ignition or radio
off if you press this button first.

Cassette Tape Messages
If an error message appears on the display, it could be
for one of the following reasons:

• TIGHT TAPE: The tape is tight and the player
cannot turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape.
Hold the tape with the open end down and try to
turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs
do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged
and should not be used in the player. Try a new
tape to make sure your player is working properly.

• BROKEN TAPE: The tape is broken. Try a
new tape.

CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the
display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-63.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error number, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with your
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
4. Press and hold the CD TAPE button until READY
appears on the display.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.

Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The CD should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio is
off, first press the eject button or DISP.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track start to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-59

1s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage.
2 \(Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
DISP (Display): Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see
how long it has been playing. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), press this button
until you see the display you want, then hold the button
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving backward through the CD.

3-60

Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
the button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the CD.
To scan tracks, press and hold either SEEK arrow for two
seconds until SCAN appears on the display. You will hear
a beep. The CD will go to the next track, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next track. The sound will
mute and SCAN and the track number will appear on the
display. The CD will only scan forward. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive cassette or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
CD TAPE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
a CD when listening to the radio.

Z (Eject):

Press this button to eject a tape. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition or radio off if you
press this button first.

CD Messages

Theft-Deterrent Feature

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:

THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed and the
radio is placed in a different vehicle. This feature
requires no user input to be activated. It is automatically
armed when it is put into the vehicle for the first time.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.

When the ignition is turned off, the blinking red light
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
If THEFTLOCK® is activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED and a red
LED indicator light will come on above the key symbol
to indicate a locked condition. If this occurs, the radio will
need to be returned to the dealer.

3-61

Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.

AM FM: Press this button to choose FM1, FM2, or AM.
If a cassette tape or CD is playing, press this button
to listen to the radio. The inactive cassette or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a cassette
tape or CD when listening to the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the audio system.
Press it again to turn on the sound.

w VOL x (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease volume.

Understanding Radio Reception
AM
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous radio station.
If a cassette tape or CD is playing, the player will
advance to the next or the previous selection.
SCAN: Press this button and SCAN will appear on the
display. The radio will go to the first preset station
on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go to
the next preset station. The radio will scan preset
stations with a strong signal only. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning.

3-62

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or they may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If
this message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.

The cut tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette tape as
a damaged tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects,
insert the cassette at least three times to ensure
thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER
indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

3-63

Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.

3-64

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between
the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care
must be taken when cleaning the rear window because
it breaks in the resistive material heating element
and will adversely affect radio and defogger
performance. See your dealer for details.

Section 4

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Full-Range Traction Control System ..................4-9
Traction Control System (TCS) .......................4-10
Steering ......................................................4-12
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-14
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-18

City Driving ..................................................4-21
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-31
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-31
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-33
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.

proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.

Drunken Driving

Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-6.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2

•
•
•
•

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

4-4

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-10 and Full-Range Traction
Control System on page 4-9.

4-5

Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.

United States

Canada

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this warning light on
the instrument panel will come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

4-8

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can not
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it
in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this by
pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock, it is different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”
in this section.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.

Full-Range Traction Control System
If the vehicle has a Full Range Traction Control
System, it will limit wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.

The LOW TRAC light will
come on when the traction
control system is limiting
wheel spin. See Low
Traction Light on
page 3-33.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
can be used again when the road conditions allow
safe use of it. See “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
The TRAC OFF light
should come on briefly
when the engine is started.
If it stays on or comes
on while the vehicle
is being driven, there is a
problem with the traction
control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-33. When the TRAC OFF warning light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
4-9

The full-range traction control system automatically
comes on whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, the system
should be left on.
But the system can be turned off. The full-range traction
control system should be turned off if the vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out”
under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
To turn the system off or
on, press the TRACTION
button located directly
behind the automatic
transaxle shift lever on the
instrument panel.

Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
The LOW TRAC light will
come on while the TCS is
limiting wheel spin. See
Low Traction Light on
page 3-33.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.

The TRAC OFF warning light will come on the
instrument panel when the system is turned off, and will
go out when the system is turned back on.

4-10

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow safe use of the cruise control, it can be
used again. See “Cruise Control” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

The TCS operates in all transaxle shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the transaxle only as high as
the shift lever position that was chosen, so use the
lower gears only when necessary. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-21.

To turn the TCS on or off,
press the TRACTION
button located directly
behind the automatic
transaxle shift lever on the
instrument panel.

While the TCS is on, the
TRAC OFF light could
come on the instrument
panel cluster to show that
the TCS is not limiting
wheel spin.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-33. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the TCS on. But
you can turn the system off if you ever need to. The TCS
should be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
See Rocking Your Vehicle in If You Are Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30.

When the TCS is turned off, the TRAC OFF warning
light will come on. It will disappear when the TCS
is turned back on. If the TCS is limiting wheel spin when
the TRACTION button is pressed, the TRAC OFF
light will come on and the TCS will turn off right away.

4-11

Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.

4-12

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Full-Range
Traction Control System on page 4-9 or Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-13

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.

4-14

and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane

change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

4-15

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

4-16

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at Night

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-17

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-18

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.

{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.

4-19

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.

4-20

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-61.

City Driving

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-22.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

4-21

Freeway Driving

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

4-22

Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-23

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

4-24

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

(Continued)

get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.

{CAUTION:

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
CAUTION:

(Continued)

could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.

4-26

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.

What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Full Range Traction Control System or
the Traction Control System, keep the system on. It
will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system, you will want to slow down and
adjust your driving to the road conditions. See
Full-Range Traction Control System on page 4-9 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10.

4-27

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you will want to begin stopping sooner
than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock
brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on
the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily
to get the most traction you can.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.

4-28

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.

{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
CAUTION:

4-30

(Continued)

CAUTION:

(Continued)

vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-76.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off.
See Full-Range Traction Control System on page 4-9 or
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-10. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and
a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle
is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the
forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not
get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed
out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

4-31

Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:

Dolly Towing

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-23.

Dinghy Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.

4-32

2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the ignition
key.

5. Release the parking brake.

Loading Your Vehicle

Tire and Loading Information Label

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.

Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

4-33

The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
seating capacity and the total weight your vehicle can
properly carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity
weight. If your vehicle has the Tire and Loading
Information label, Example 1, the label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. If your
vehicle has the Tire-Loading Information label, Example
2, the label is on the inside trunk lid.
The Tire and Loading Information label also gives you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the factory-installed, original equipment tires on your
vehicle. For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-68.
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

4-34

There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-39 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

4-35

Example 1

Example 2

Loading Your Vehicle

Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =

700 lbs (317 kg)

4-36

Total

Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

Total

Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x =

750 lbs (340 kg)

Available Cargo Weight

250 lbs (113 kg)

Certification Label

Example 3

Loading Your Vehicle
Item

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

Total

Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

Available Cargo
Weight =

0 lbs (0 kg)

The Certification label, found on the rear edge of the
driver’s door tells the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-37

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread it
out. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (75 kg) in your trunk.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages or any thing else
are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

4-38

{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assembly, and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What
is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. But trailering is different than just
driving the vehicle by itself.

4-39

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

Weight of the Trailer

Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) the vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that the
vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts.

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

There are three important considerations have to do
with weight:

• The weight of the trailer.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
4-40

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on
any special equipment that is on the vehicle.
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice,
or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If
there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or
cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because the
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue
(A) should weigh 10 percent to 15 percent of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. The
correct weight could be achieved simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33. Be sure not to go over the GVW
limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue. If a weight distribution hitch
is used, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit
before applying the weight distribution spring bars.

4-41

Hitches

Safety Chains

It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:

Chains should always be attached between the vehicle
and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can be turned.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.

• If holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle to
install a trailer hitch, then be sure to seal the holes
later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not
sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-29. Dirt and water can, too.

4-42

Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into the vehicle’s brake system. If that is done,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

Passing

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, get to know the rig.
Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle is now a good deal longer and not
nearly as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

More passing distance is needed up ahead when
towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good deal
longer with the trailer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the vehicle you have passed before you
can return to the proper lane.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check the
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can
help avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

4-43

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your
dealer. The arrows on the instrument panel will flash
whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. You may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long hill or steep downgrade. If the vehicle is not
shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If towing a trailer, you may want to drive in THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X). Shift
to a lower gear as needed.

4-44

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer’s
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the parking
brake, and shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

• Start the engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle will need service more often when it pulls a
trailer. See. Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid; which
should not be overfilled; engine oil, drive belt(s),
and cooling and brake systems. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to review
this information before starting on a trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.

4-45

✍ NOTES

4-46

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-4
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Supercharger Oil ..........................................5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29

Cooling System ............................................5-32
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-40
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-42
Brakes ........................................................5-43
Battery ........................................................5-46
Jump Starting ...............................................5-47
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-53
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-55
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-55
Headlamps ..................................................5-55
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-56
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-58
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-59
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60
Tires ..............................................................5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-68
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-69
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-72
Buying New Tires .........................................5-72

5-1

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-75
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-75
Tire Chains ..................................................5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-89
Appearance Care ............................................5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-90
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-93
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-95
Finish Damage .............................................5-95

5-2

Underbody Maintenance ................................5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-95
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-96
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97
Electrical System ............................................5-97
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-98
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
CAUTION:

(Continued)

5-3

CAUTION:

(Continued)

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.

Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-97.

5-4

Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use only premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane of 91 or higher. In an emergency,
you may be able to use a lower octane — as low as
87 — if heavy knocking does not occur. Refill your tank
with premium fuel as soon as possible. Otherwise,
you might damage your engine. If you are using
91 octane or higher-octane fuel and you hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications

California Fuel

It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will
operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35 ) and
your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,
return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.

Canada Only

5-5

Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.

5-6

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.

Filling Your Tank

Turn the vehicle off to refuel.

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged door
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. To remove the
fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap
has a spring in it; so if it is released too soon, it will
spring back.

5-7

{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.

5-8

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
fuel tank. Wait a few seconds after filling the fuel
tank before removing the fuel pump nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-93.

When putting the fuel cap back on, turn it clockwise
until a click is heard. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.

{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-35.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

5-10

{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle located
to the left of the
steering column below
the instrument
panel.

2. Push the secondary hood release, located under
the hood, to the right to disengage it.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure all the filler caps
are properly secured. Pull the hood down and close
it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 engine, you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-42.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-46.
C. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Battery
on page 5-46.
D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98.
E. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 5-32.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-32.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Below Generator).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-40.
H. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-32.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
K. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-24.
L. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-43.
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 Supercharged engine, you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-42.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-46.
C. Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Battery
on page 5-46.
D. Underhood Electrical Center. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-98.
E. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 5-32.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-32.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Below Generator).
See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-40.
H. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-32.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16.
K. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-24.
L. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Automatic Transaxle
Fluid on page 5-24.
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

5-15

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.

5-16

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-103.

See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil dipstick.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the crosshatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.

5-17

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:

• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-18

• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below –20°F (–29°C), it is
recommended that you use either and SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.

You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.

5-19

When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System™)

How to Reset the CHANGE OIL
SOON Light

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.

The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON light being turned on, reset
the system.

When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service
people who will perform this work using genuine GM
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-20

After changing the engine oil, reset the system by
performing the following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON light flashes, the system
is resetting.
3. Turn the key to OFF, then start the vehicle. The oil
life will change to 100 percent.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on when
you start your vehicle, the oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
If you have a Driver Information Center, the system may
be reset by pressing the DIC RESET button for five
seconds while viewing the oil life display on the
DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-42.

What to Do with Used Oil

Supercharger Oil

Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.

Unless you are technically
qualified and have the
proper tools, you should let
your dealer or a qualified
service center perform
this maintenance.

When to Check
Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every
36 months, whichever occurs first.

What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

5-21

How to Check and Add Oil

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check oil only when
the engine is cold. Allow the engine to cool two to
three hours after running.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
location of engine air cleaner/filter.

{CAUTION:
If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug
while the engine is hot, pressure may cause
hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole. You may
be burned. Do not remove the plug until the
engine cools.
1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before
removing it.
2. Remove the oil fill plug.
3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the
bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.
4. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place.
Tighten to 88 lb-in (10 Y).

5-22

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change and
replace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles
(40 000 km).

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove it from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains “caked” with dirt, a new
filter is required.

To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Loosen the screw and clamp on the air duct.
2. Lift the two clips
located on the top of
the filter assembly
to unlock the cover.

3. Disconnect the duct and reposition it while removing
the cover.

{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/
filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.

4. Pull out the filter.
5. Inspect or replace the filter if needed.
6. Reinstall the filter.
7. Push the two clips located on top of the filter
assembly to lock the cover.

5-23

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

How to Check

When to Check and Change

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.

A good time to check the automatic transaxle fluid level
is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If the vehicle is not used under any of these conditions,
change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C
to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.

5-24

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:

• Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
pull it back out again.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear, pausing for about three
seconds in each gear. Then, position the shift lever
in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transaxle
fluid dipstick handle is the
black loop located
toward the rear of the
engine. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the crosshatched
area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

5-25

How to Add Fluid

Engine Coolant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.

The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the
dipstick. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEXRON®-III labeled automatic
transaxle fluid.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

5-26

The following explains the cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem
with engine overheating or if more coolant needs to be
added to the radiator, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to Use

If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer check the cooling system.

Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If this coolant mixture is used, nothing
else needs to be added.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.

{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Checking Coolant
The engine coolant recovery tank is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle at the rear of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a
level surface. When the
engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at the
COLD mark or a little
higher. When the engine is
warm, the level should
be up to the HOT mark or
a little higher.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-27

Adding Coolant
If the vehicle needs more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery
tank, but be careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29.

{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.

5-28

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-32.

Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line
up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
The radiator pressure cap is located near the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.

Engine Overheating
The coolant temperature gage and the hot engine
warning light on the instrument panel can indicate an
overheated engine condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-34 and Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-34.

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
The emergency operating mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists, this mode alternates
firing groups of cylinders, to help prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there will be a significant loss in
power and engine performance. The engine coolant
temperature gage will move to the red area and
the engine coolant temperature warning light will come
on, indicating that an overheated engine condition
exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a
trailer in the overheated engine protection operating
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16.

5-29

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:

(Continued)

everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” under Engine Overheating on page 5-29
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
CAUTION:

5-30

(Continued)

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” under Engine
Overheating on page 5-29 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheated engine warning can indicate a serious
problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light on page 3-34.
If there is an overheated engine warning, and no steam
is seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when
the vehicles:

•
•
•
•

Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheated engine warnings no longer exist, the
vehicle can be driven. Just to be safe, drive slower
for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back
on, continue to drive.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while parked. If the warning still exists, turn
off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until
it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

Tows a trailer.

If the overheated engine warning appears with no sign
of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Adjust the heater to the highest temperature and
fan speed settings and open the window as
necessary.

5-31

Cooling System
When it is safe to lift the hood, this is what will be seen:

{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Electric Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5-32

When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should be
at or above the COLD
mark on the coolant
recovery tank.

If it is not, there may be a leak at the pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.

Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
in the Index for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, the vehicle needs service.

5-33

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If no problem has been found yet, but the coolant level
is not at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26 for more information.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD mark, start the vehicle.

If the overheated warnings continue, there is one more
thing that can be done. Add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done.

{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until the
first stop. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.

5-35

1. The radiator pressure cap can be removed when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield
to access the bleed valve.

5-36

3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube
and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill
tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise
and remove it.

3.2. If the vehicle has a supercharged engine,
remove the nut in the center of the cover
shield.
3.3. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide
the catch tab out of the engine bracket and
remove the cover shield.
3.4. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the
valve cover oil fill hole until you are ready to
replace the cover shield.

5-37

4. After the engine cools,
open the coolant air
bleed valve. The bleed
valve is located on
the thermostat
housing.

5. Fill the radiator with the
proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture,
up to the base of the
filler neck. See
Engine Coolant on
page 5-26 for more
information about the
proper coolant mixture.

If a stream of coolant is coming from an air bleed
valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valve after the radiator is filled.
5-38

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. Replace the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.
7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield
under the bracket on the engine.
7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield over the
hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and
cap by twisting clockwise.
7.4. If the vehicle has a supercharged engine,
install the nut in the center of the cover
shield.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
mark on the coolant recovery tank.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.

10. Start the engine and let it run until the upper
radiator hose feels that it is getting hot. Watch
out for the engine cooling fans.
11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.

5-39

Power Steering Fluid

12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT
mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark
when the engine is cold.

5-40

The power steering fluid reservoir is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle at the back of the engine
compartment.. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at the HOT mark.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-41

Windshield Washer Fluid

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the

What to Use

manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.

Adding Washer Fluid

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full

Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.

Add washer fluid until the windshield washer reservoir
is full.

5-42

Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

5-43

{CAUTION:

United States

Canada

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

5-44

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-89.

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.

5-45

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.

Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-46

If your battery has a very low charge or is dead, you
may not be able to remove the ignition key from
the ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). Refer to
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-27.

Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-47 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-61.

Jump Starting
If the battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the auxiliary power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-47

To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal,
squeeze the sides of the red plastic cap and pull it
upward. Always use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your
battery.

{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
4. Open the hood of each vehicle and locate the
batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal location on each vehicle. You will not need
to access your battery for jump starting. Your
vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal for that purpose. The terminal is located on
the same side of the engine compartment as
your battery. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-48

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.

5-49

7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.

6. Connect the red (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-50

8. Now connect the
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal part, or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.

5-51

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-52

Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a headlamp system equipped with
horizontal and vertical aim indicators. The aim has been
pre-set at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even though the vertical and
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on
the “0” (zero) marks on their scales.
If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment may be
necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers, for
horizontal aim, or if oncoming drivers flash their high
beams at you, for vertical aim. If you believe the
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that
you take it to your dealer for service; however, it is
possible for you to re-aim the headlamps as described
in the following procedure.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.

To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:

• The headlamps must be off for one hour prior to
aiming and must remain off during this procedure.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface.

• If necessary, pads may be used on an uneven
surface to help level the vehicle.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.

• There should not be any cargo or loading of the
vehicle. It should however, have a full fuel tank and
one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver’s seat.

• Close all doors.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.

5-53

Driver’s Side Headlamp Shown
A. Vertical Aim Adjustment Screw
B. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Screw
Open the hood and locate the vertical and horizontal
aim indicators. The aiming screw for the vertical
aim indicator (A) is at the center of the headlamp cover
and the aiming screw for the horizontal aim indicator (B)
is on the outboard side of the headlamp cover.

5-54

Passenger’s Side Headlamp Shown
A. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Screw
B. Horizontal Block Index Plate
C. Vertical Aiming Level
Start with the horizontal aim. The adjustment screws
can be turned with an E8 Torx® socket.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
1. Turn the horizontal aiming screw until the indicator
is lined up with zero.
2. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the level bubble
is lined up with zero.

Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer. For the type of bulb, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59.

Headlamps
1. Open the hood.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.

2. Pull up on the headlamp retainers (A) to release the
assembly locator tabs.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (B) from the
headlamp assembly.
4. Slide the headlamp assembly out of the slots.

5-55

Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to the
removal procedure earlier in this section.
2. Remove the rubber bulb access cover.
3. Twist the sidemarker lamp socket, located on the
outboard side of the headlamp assembly,
counterclockwise and pull it from the headlamp
assembly.
4. Holding the base of the socket, pull the old bulb
from the socket.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket.
5. Remove the rubber access cover from behind the
bulb being replaced.
6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn and remove it
from the headlamp assembly.
7. Lift the plastic locking tab on the electrical connector
and pull the connector from the headlamp bulb
socket.
8. Connect the new headlamp bulb to the electrical
connector, making sure the connector tab snaps
into place.
9. Insert the bulb socket into the headlamp assembly.
10. Reverse all steps to reassemble the headlamp
assembly, then check the lamps.
5-56

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lamp
assembly.

Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
1. Open the trunk.

3. Remove the old bulb by turning it counterclockwise
one-quarter turn.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
2. Reach through the access opening in the trunk lid.

5. Turn the socket clockwise one-quarter turn to
reinstall.

5-57

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps

3. Remove the three plastic wing nuts (A).
One wing nut is located on top of the carpet. The
other two are located underneath the carpet.
4. Pull the taillamp housing (B) away from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Squeeze the tab on the socket and turn the socket
counterclockwise.
6. Pull out the socket.
7. Pull the old bulb out of the socket. There are two
bulbs on each taillamp.
8. Push in a new bulb.
9. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.

1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the convenience net If the vehicle
has one.

5-58

Back-Up Lamps

4. Twist and pull the bulb socket (B) from the trunk lid.
5. Twist and pull the old bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Twist and push the new bulb into the lamp socket.
7. Twist and push the lamp socket into the trunk
lid covering.
8. Reverse Steps 2 and 3 to reinstall the lamp
covering.

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps

1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the seven hex nuts (A) from the lamp
covering.
3. Remove the lamp covering.

Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps

1156

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)

3155

Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps

4157NAK

High-Beam Headlamps

9005

Low-Beam Headlamps

9006

Taillamps and Stoplamps/Turn
Signal

3057

Taillamp

194

For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.

5-59

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking each time maintenace is performed.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
1. Turn on the wipers to LO.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm 3 to 4 inches
(7.5 to 10 cm) away from the windshield.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the windshield
wiper arm connecting point and slide the blade
assembly down toward the glass to remove it from
the wiper arm.
5. Slide the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into
place.
For wiper blade type and length, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13

5-60

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden impact
— such as when you hit a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.

5-61

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger Car Tire Example

5-62

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-73.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For more information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.

5-63

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compat spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-89 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-77.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-89 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-68.
Compact Spare Tire Example

5-64

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S.
Tire and Rim Association.

(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The
load range represents the load carrying capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to
279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire
is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from “A”
to “Z”.

5-65

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) before a
tire has built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-68.
5-66

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-72.

5-67

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-73.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-33.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing

•
•
•
•
•

Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-68

When to Check

Tire Pressure Monitor System

Check your tires once a month or more.

The tire inflation monitor system detects differences in
tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in
tire pressure. The system can alert you if a tire is
low – but it does not replace normal tire maintenance.
See Tires on page 5-61.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.

When the LOW TIRE light comes on the instrument
panel, stop as soon as you can and check all the tires
for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-77. Also, check the tire pressure in all four
tires as soon as possible. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-68.
In order for the tire inflation system to function properly,
the vehicle must be driven between 45 and 90 minutes
before the system determines the tire pressure in
each tire. The driving time may be longer depending on
an individual’s driving habits. The data does not have
to be accumulated during a single trip. Once determined,
the system will store the tire pressures until the
system is reset.
The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of driving
time in each of three speed ranges to determine tire
pressures. The speed ranges are 15 to 40 mph (25 to
65 km/h), 40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h) and above
65 mph (105 km/h). When the storage of the tire inflation
information is complete, the LOW TIRE light will come on
the instrument panel after two to eight minutes if one tire
is inflated 12 psi (83 kPa) less than the other three tires.
5-69

Detection thresholds may be higher and detection times
may be longer on rough roads, curves and at high
speeds. The system is not capable of inflation differences
at speeds greater than 70 mph (110 km/h).
The tire inflation monitor system will not alert you if the
pressure in more than one tire is low, if the system
is not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle is moving
faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
The LOW TIRE light will stay on while the ignition is on,
until the system is reset
Do not reset the tire inflation monitor system without
first correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If the
system is reset when the tire pressures are incorrect, it
will not function properly and may not alert you when
a tire is low.
Any time a tire’s pressure is adjusted, the tires are
rotated, or one or more tires is repaired or replaced, the
tire inflation monitor system will need to be reset. The
system also needs to be reset when new tires are
purchased and if the vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected.

5-70

To reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Remove the passenger’s side instrument panel
cover to get to the fuse block.
3. Press and hold the RESET button in the fuse block
for about five seconds.
4. The LOW TIRE light will come on and flash three
times. Then it will go off. If the light does not go
off, see your dealer for service.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-72 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-75 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.

{CAUTION:

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.

Reset the Tire Inflation Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-69.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-103.

5-71

When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

5-72

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-33.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.

{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

5-73

Treadwear

Temperature – A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-74

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more
information.

5-75

Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:

{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

(Continued)

you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.

{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/60R16 size tires, don’t
use tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause
CAUTION:

5-76

(Continued)

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/60R16 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE
Class ″S″ type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-77

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers.

{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-78

The following steps will explain how to use the jack and
change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
1. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it. Then
lift and remove
the cover. See
Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-89 for more
information about the
compact spare tire.

2. Remove the compact spare tire.

5-79

3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

5-80

The tools needed to change a tire include the jack (A),
extension and protection guide (B, and wheel
wrench (C).

Removing the Wheel Center Caps
To remove a center cap,
use the wrench to pry
gently at the notch. Do not
use a tool that is narrower
than the wrench to pry
at this notch. Then pry off
the cap.

Removing the Wheel Covers
If the vehicle has wheel covers, be sure to use a wheel
wrench to begin the process of loosening the plastic
wheel nut caps.
Once the plastic nut caps
have been loosened with
the wheel wrench,
finish loosening them with
your fingers.

Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along
the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off. Be
careful; the edge may be sharp. Do not try to remove
the cover with your bare hands.

5-81

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts,
but do no remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack
lift head.

5-82

3. For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put the
jack lift head (C) about 6 inches (15 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel opening (B) or just
behind the two bolts (A) as shown.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the
jack lift head (B) about 5 inches (13 cm) from
the front edge of the rear wheel opening (C) or just
behind the off-set (A) as shown.

5-83

{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

5-84

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.

{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.

Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.

{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

5-85

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

(Continued)

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.

{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
CAUTION:

5-86

CAUTION:

(Continued)

Do not try to put the wheel cover on the compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk. Use the following
procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
protector, located in the foam holder, to help avoid
wheel surface damage. To store a full-size tire, place
the tire valve stem facing down, and then remove
the protector and attach the retainer securely. Store the
cover as far forward as possible.

5-87

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.

{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89. See
the storage instructions label to return the compact
spare to the trunk properly.
Be sure to reset tire inflation monitor system after you
replace the compact spare tire with a full-sized one. See
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-69.

5-88

A. Retainer
B. Cover
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Nut
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Bolt Screw
I. Foam Holder

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, check
to make sure it is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
However, It is best to replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare will last
longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again.
The tire inflation monitor system must be reset after
installing or removing the compact spare. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-69.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

5-89

Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

•
•
•
•

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-96.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

5-90

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Cleaning Vinyl

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.

5-91

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-96.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.

5-92

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-96.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-96.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.

5-93

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-94

Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

Underbody Maintenance

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-95

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner

Finish Enhancer

5-96

Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description

Usage
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
Swirl Remover Polish
light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine Low
protects in one easy step,
Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.

Vehicle Identification

Service Parts Identification Label

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This label is located on the inside of the trunk lid. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered for the vehicle. It
has the following information printed on it:

•
•
•
•
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

The VIN
The model designation
Paint information
A list of all production options and special
equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
The vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
5-97

Headlamp Wiring

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the headlamps to go on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have the headlamp
system checked right away.

The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and in the fuse block wiring itself. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse block
protect the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.

5-98

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Make sure a
bad fuse is replaced with a new one of the identical
size and rating.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are located in
a fuse block on the
passenger’s side of the
instrument panel. Pull off
the cover labeled FUSES to
expose the fuse block.

Fuses
PRK/LCK
Blank
Blank
PCM, BCM,
U/H
RADIO PREM.
SOUND
PWR MIR
Blank
INT/ILLUM
Blank
IGN 0: CLSTR,
PCM & BCM
Circuit
Breakers
TIRE RESET
PWR/WNDW
PWR S/ROOF
R/DEFOG
PWR SEAT
Blank

Usage
Tire Inflation Monitor Reset Button
Power Windows, Power Sunroof
Rear Window Defogger
Power Seat
Not Used

Blank
Blank
Blank
ACCY PWR
BUS
DR/ LCK
Blank
R/LAMPS
Blank

Usage
Ignition Key Solenoid
Not Used
Not Used
Ignition Signal: Hot in Run and Start,
Powertrain Control Module, Body
Control Module, Underhood Relay
Remote Radio Premium Sound
Power Mirrors
Not Used
Panel Dimming
Not Used
Ignition Signal: Hot in Run, Unlock
and Start, Cluster, Powertrain
Control Module, Body Control
Module
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Interior Lamps
Door Locks
Not Used
Taillamps, License Plate Lamps
Not Used
5-99

Fuses
CRUISE
Blank
CLSTR
LTR
STOP LAMPS
ONSTAR
PRK/LGHT
Blank
CRNK SIG,
BCM, CLSTR
HVAC
BTSI (REGAL)
AIR BAG
BCM PWR
HAZRD

5-100

Usage
Cruise Control
Not Used
Instrument Panel Cluster
Cigarette Lighter
Stoplamps
OnStar®
Parking Lamps
Not Used
Crank Signal, Body Control Module,
Cluster, Powertrain Control Module
Ignition Signal, Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning Control Head
Shifter Lock Solenoid
Air Bag
Body Control Module
Hazard Warning Flashers

Fuses
LH HTD SEAT
Blank
BCM ACCY
Blank
LOW BLWER
ABS
TRN SIG
RADIO, HVAC,
RFA, CLSTR
ALDL
HI BLWR
RH HTD SEAT
STR/WHL
CNTRL
WPR

Usage
Driver’s Heated Seat
Not Used
Ignition Signal: Hot in ACCESSORY
and RUN, Body Control Module
Not Used
Low Blower
Anti-Lock Brakes
Turn Signals, Cornering Lamps
Radio; Heating Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning Head; Remote Keyless
Entry, Cluster
High Blower
Passenger’s Heated Seat
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Windshield Wipers

Underhood Fuse Block
Some fuses and relays are located in the underhood
fuse block on the passenger’s side of the vehicle in the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

Fuses
1
2
3
4

5
6
7

Usage
Anti-Lock Brake System
Starter Solenoid
Power Seats, Rear Window
Defogger, Heated Seats
High Blower, Hazard Flasher,
Stoplamps, Power Mirror, Door
Locks
Ignition Switch, BTS Shifter Lock
Solenoid, Stoplamps, Anti-Lock
Brake System, Turn Signals,
Cluster, Air Bag, Daytime Running
Lamps Module
Cooling Fan
Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
Remote Keyless Entry, Data Link,
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Head, Cluster, Radio,
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Switch, Windshield Wipers,
Radio, Steering Wheel Controls,
Body Control Module, Power
Windows, Sunroof; Heating,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning
Controls; Daytime Running Lamps,
Rear Window Defogger Relay

5-101

Relays
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Starter Solenoid
Cooling Fan 1
Ignition Main
Air Pump (Optional)
Not Used
Horn
Fog Lamps
Not Used
Fuel Pump

Fuses
20
21
22
23
24
25

Usage
Not Used
Generator
Engine Control Module
Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
Cooling Fan
Electronic Ignition

5-102

Fuses
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
SYMBOL

Usage
Transaxle
Horn
Fuel Injector
Oxygen Sensor
Engine Emissions
Fog Lamps
Right Headlamp
Rear Compartment Release
Parking Lamps
Fuel Pump
Left Headlamp
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
Diode

Capacities and Specifications
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application

English

Metric

2.4 lbs

1.1 kg

Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement
After Complete Overhaul
When draining/replacing converter, more fluid will be needed.

7.4 quarts
10.0 quarts

7.0 L
9.5 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir

11.7 quarts

11.0 L

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank

4.5 quarts

4.3 L

17.0 gallons

64.0 L

100 lb ft

140 Y

Wheel Nut Torque

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4

Engine Specifications
Engine

VIN Code

Displacement

Firing Order

3800 V6
3800 Supercharged V6

K
1

231 CID

1–6–5–4–3–2

5-103

✍ NOTES

5-104

Section 6

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

6-1

Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

6-2

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-33.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.

Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.

6-4

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-16 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light comes
on within ten months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.

Service
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-61.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).

Maintenance I

Maintenance II

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

6-5

Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Service
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-22. An Emission Control Service.
Supercharger service (if equipped). An
Emission Control Service. See footnotes
† and (l).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.

6-6

25,000
(41 500)
•

50,000
(83 000)
•

75,000
(125 000)
•

100,000
(166 000)
•

125,000
(207 500)
•

150,000
(240 000)
•

•

•
•
•
•

Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console
door and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) For supercharged engines onl: Check the
supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger
oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs
first). See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.

6-8

Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level Check

At Least Once a Year

Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for further details.

Starter Switch Check

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-61 for further
details.

Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-44 for further details.

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-24 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-24 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-10

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With

{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.

the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).

6-12

Usage
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Supercharger
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl

Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Supercharger Oil (GM Part No. U.S.
12345982, in Canada 10953513).
See Supercharger Oil on page 5-21.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.

Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
Weatherstrip No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
Conditioning
992887).

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number

ACDelco® Part
Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

24508572

A1614C

Engine Oil Filter

25010792

PF-47

Part

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Gap
Windshield Wiper Blades

10406026

—

12568387
.060 inches (1.52 mm)

41–101
.060 inches (1.52 mm)

22143943

—

Type

Shepherd’s Hook Style

Length

22.0 inches (56.0 cm)

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Engine Belt Routing for L67 Supercharged Engine
((3.8 Liter)
Engine Belt Routing for L36 Engine (3.8 Liter)

6-14

A. Engine Belt
B. Supercharger Engine Belt

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date

6-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or
Maintenance II

Services Performed

Section 7

Customer Assistance and Information

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records ....................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

7-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Buick Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)

• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Buick, the letter should be addressed to Buick’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

7-4

From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance Program
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium
Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered
under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new car
warranty (whichever occurs first).
Our commitment to Buick owners has always included
superior service through our network of Buick dealers.
Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an
extra measure of convenience and security.
Buick’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed
by a team of technically trained advisors, who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Buick
dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

•
•
•
•
•

7-6

Fuel delivery
Lock-out service (identification required)
Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
Change a flat tire
Jump starts

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of
the following additional services depending on your
needs:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Hotels
Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities
Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations
Police, fire department or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Buick’s comprehensive warranty. However, when
other services are utilized, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following information to give the advisor:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle license plate number

Buick reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Buick’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call
away. Buick Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy Transportation
Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.

7-7

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to
10 miles from the dealership.
7-8

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such a s taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Records
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash or near crash
event by computer systems commonly called event data
recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, seat belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance data, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9

To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or

• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may

• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, please check
the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for
information on its operations and data collection.
7-10

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government

Service Publications Ordering
Information

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Service Manuals

Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11

Service Bulletins

Current and Past Model Order Forms

Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

7-12

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-42
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-47, 3-54
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-30
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-46
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-52
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-54
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-51
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-52
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-51
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-49
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
AM ............................................................... 3-62
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-64
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............... 3-32
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-89
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92

Appearance Care (cont.)
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Backglass Antenna ......................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with CD ............................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Operation ........................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................

5-95
5-90
5-93
5-95
5-95
5-95
5-96
5-92
3-17
3-44
3-62
3-64
3-63
3-64
3-64
3-52
3-45
3-45
3-61
3-62
3-20
5-24
2-21

Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-64
Backing Up .................................................... 4-43
Battery .......................................................... 5-46
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-8
Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-16
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-24
System Warning Light .................................. 3-31
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-43
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-45
Brakes .......................................................... 5-43
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-17
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-55
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-59
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-57
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-55
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-53
Headlamps ................................................. 5-55
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-59
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-58
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-72

California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-26, 4-39, 2-12, 2-29
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-63
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-64
Your CDs ................................................... 3-64
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-58
Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-9
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-59
CD Messages ........................................ 3-52, 3-61
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-35
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-57
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-20
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-76
Charging System Light .................................... 3-31
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-35
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-27
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10

Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System) .....................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System ..............................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Rear Seat Position ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ...............................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .....
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................

1-54
5-95
1-32
1-29
1-38
1-27
1-40
1-42
1-40
1-44
1-36
1-37
1-35
3-17
5-90
5-93
5-95
5-92
5-94
5-93

Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-90
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-92
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-92
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-91
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-92
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-95
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-91
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-94
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-25
Dual .......................................................... 3-17
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-20
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-89
Control Buttons ............................................... 3-43
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-36
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-34
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-34
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20
Cooling System .............................................. 5-32
Cornering Lamps ............................................ 3-13
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-14
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-40
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12

Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................... 3-12
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-19, 3-23
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-14
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-15
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-12
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-6
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-32

Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Trunk Ajar Warning Light .............................. 3-40
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-42
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ........................................................... 4-21
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-44
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-27
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-20
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-20
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-43
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-20
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-17

E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Supercharger Oil .........................................

5-97
5-98
5-98
5-98
5-98
2-13
3-37
5-22
5-46
3-39
3-35
5-26
2-20
3-34
3-34
6-14
5-12
2-29
5-16
5-29
2-19
5-21

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-45
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-19
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-14
Event Data Records (EDR) ................................ 7-9
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-15
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-26
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-11

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ....... 3-48, 3-55
Finding a Station .................................... 3-46, 3-53
Finish Care .................................................... 5-93
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-95
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-24
Power Steering ........................................... 5-40
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-42
FM ............................................................... 3-62
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-13

Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-6
Following Distance .......................................... 4-43
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-41
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-4
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-42
Full-Range Traction Control System ..................... 4-9
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98

G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-34
Fuel .......................................................... 3-41
Speedometer .............................................. 3-28
Tachometer ................................................. 3-29
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-4
Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-35
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ............................................. 7-5

H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-53
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-98
Headlamps .................................................... 5-55
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-55
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-56
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-55
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hitches .......................................................... 4-42
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-34
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-35

How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-26
How to Check ........................................ 5-24, 5-69
How to Check and Add Oil ............................... 5-22
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-41
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-11
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-20

J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-47

K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2

I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-31
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-30
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-36
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-37
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-28
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-40
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Illumination on Remote Activation ........................ 2-7
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-68
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-27
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-98
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14

L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-12,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System ..............................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running .....................................................
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................

3-11
3-14
1-20
1-22
1-38
1-40
2-11
2-26
3-30
3-32

Light (cont.)
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-31
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-39
Charging System ......................................... 3-31
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-40
Door/Trunk Ajar Warning ............................... 3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-34
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-42
Low Oil Level ............................................. 3-39
Low Traction ............................................... 3-33
Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-40
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-35
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-29
Security ..................................................... 3-40
Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-41
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-33
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-35
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-33
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-15
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-33
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10

Loss of Control ...............................................
Low Fuel Warning Light ...................................
Low Traction Light ..........................................
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .......................

4-15
3-42
3-33
3-40

M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-45
Making Turns ................................................. 4-43
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-35
Manual Operation ................................... 3-17, 3-21
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-7
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-32
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-32
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-33
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-33
Modes ........................................................... 3-44
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13

O
Odometer ......................................................
Off-Road Recovery ..........................................
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Engine .......................................................
Low Oil Level Light ......................................

3-28
4-14
3-39
5-16
3-39

Oil (cont.)
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38
Supercharger, Engine ................................... 5-21
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-27
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-35
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-34
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-34
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-35
Operation Tips ................................................ 3-25
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-33
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-33
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-29
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12

P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-27
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-27

Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-24
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-28
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-44
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter ..................................................... 3-25
Passenger Control .......................................... 3-23
Passing ................................................. 4-14, 4-43
PASS-Key® II ................................................. 2-16
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-15
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-57
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-50, 3-59
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-45, 3-52
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-16
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98
Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-40
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Power Steering ............................................... 4-12
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10

Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11

R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-48, 3-55
Radio Messages ..................................... 3-50, 3-57
Radios .......................................................... 3-44
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-63
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-64
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-64
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-52
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-45
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-45
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-61
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-62
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-49, 3-56
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-15
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-24
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-21
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-21
Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-19, 3-24
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-32
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® .............................................. 2-32
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-31
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-31
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ............. 2-4
Remote Trunk Release .................................... 2-12
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-82
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79
Removing the Wheel Center Caps .................... 5-81
Removing the Wheel Covers ............................ 5-81
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-46
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-55
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-54
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-55
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-54
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-55
Resynchronization ............................................. 2-8
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ................................................ 1-20
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31

Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-30

Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-29
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-92
Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-20
Driver Position ............................................ 1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-21
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-20
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-19
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-42
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-3
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-6
11

Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-42
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-40
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-40
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44
Security Feedback ............................................ 2-5
Security Light ................................................. 3-40
Sensors ......................................................... 3-23
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-35
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-41
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-12
Service Engine Soon Light ............................... 3-35
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-46, 3-53
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-45
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-47, 3-54
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-95
Shift Lock Release .......................................... 2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-25
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-14
Skidding ........................................................ 4-16
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-91
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-103
Speedometer .................................................. 3-28
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-6
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-19
Steering ........................................................ 4-12
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-13
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-12
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-62
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-35
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-36
Glove Box .................................................. 2-35
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-87
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-88
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-36

T
Tachometer ....................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..........................
TCS Warning Light ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
PASS-Key® II ..............................................

3-29
5-58
3-33
3-61
2-16
2-16

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-35
Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-62
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-65
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-66
Tires ............................................................. 5-61
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72
Chains ....................................................... 5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-89
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-68
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-75
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-72
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-20
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-36
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-37
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-26
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-41
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-31
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31

Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................. 4-10
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-33
Full-Range Control System ............................. 4-9
Low Light ................................................... 3-33
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-42
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-24
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-21
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case
Unit Repair Manual ...................................... 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-28
Trunk ............................................................ 2-12
Trunk Assist Handle ........................................ 2-13
Trunk Lock .................................................... 2-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-44

U
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-101
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-62
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-73
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-76
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-90

Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-33
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-41
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Records ............................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-46
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-15
Visors ........................................................... 2-15

W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-26
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-40
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-93
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-40
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-41
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18
14

What Kind of Oil to Use .................................. 5-21
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-21
What to Use .................................. 5-27, 5-41, 5-42
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-75
Replacement ............................................... 5-75
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-17
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-20
When to Check ...................................... 5-21, 5-69
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-24
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-41
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-45
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-35
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-8
Window Lock-Out ............................................ 2-15
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
Windshield Washer
Fluid .......................................................... 5-42
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-60
Fuses ........................................................ 5-98
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26

Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : null
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 09:49:30-05:00
Creator                         : EDS
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 4351993
Author                          : EDS
Sha 1                           : 7529680f244c3d0f5113014fbcaaf766abaf5498
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 10:48:27-05:00
Modify Date                     : 2003:05:27 08:45:42-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2003:05:27 08:45:42-04:00
Create Date                     : 2003:05:27 03:30:24-04:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Producer                        : 
Keywords                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2004/buick/regal
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 354

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Buick Owner's Manual 2004 Regal Owners

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation